Canon | IXUS 310 HS | Quick Start Guide | Canon IXUS 310 HS Quick start guide

Canon IXUS 310 HS Quick start guide
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‬
‫‪CEL-SR3QA2M0‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:20:43‬‬
‫‪EC300_GSG-E-CTE_AR-FA_cover.indb 1‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫‪.Manuals Disk‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺴﻢ ”ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ“‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ؛ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:43‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6L‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(AV‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫‪WS-DC10‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.DIGITAL CAMERA Manuals Disk‬‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺗﻘﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Adobe Reader‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .PDF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Word/Word Viewer‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪) Word‬ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻸﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:43‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ؛ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺯﻋﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﻮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻗﺎ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ -‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﺣﻴﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻛﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪CANON INC.‬‬
‫‪30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan‬‬
‫‪CANON EUROPA N.V.‬‬
‫‪Bovenkerkerweg 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:44‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 3‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺑﻠﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻬﺐ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﱠﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺣﻤﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﺴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎء ﻏﺰﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:44‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 4‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ )ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺰﻋﺎﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:44‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 5‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺠﻠﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:44‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 6‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪٢.................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪٣..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٤...........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪/‬ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٧...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪٨........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٩...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪١١.................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪١١..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪١٤.....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٦.........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪١٧......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪١٨.................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪١٩.........................................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٢٢.............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺸﻂ‪٢٣................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٢٤...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪٢٥...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٢٧.............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ‪٢٨.................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪٣٢...................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪٣٣......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪/‬ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﻟﻔﻪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺼﻤﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:44‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 7‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﱢﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻟﻮ ﻟﻢ ﺃﺗﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ؟‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:44‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 8‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪CB-2LY‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ‪ o‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ) (‬
‫ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :CB-2LY‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ) (‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :CB-2LYE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪CB-2LYE‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ) ( ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:44‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 9‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ١٨٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪Camera & Imaging Products‬‬
‫)‪.Association (CIPA‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ٍ‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ( ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫”ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪“.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨُ ِﻔﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻔﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.o‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻐﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﻠﻤﺄﺧﺬ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ؛ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺨﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﻌﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:44‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 10‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SD‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SDHC‬‬
‫*‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SDXC‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪MultiMediaCards‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪MMCplus‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪HC MMCplus‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ .SD‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SDXC‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﺘﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ً SDXC‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻧﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﱢﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳُﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﱢﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) ( ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺤﻪ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:44‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 11‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ]ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؟‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪ SDXC‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:44‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 12‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 1231‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ 5042‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ؟‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:44‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 13‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪.op‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ op‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪.ú‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:45‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 14‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ ،Â‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ ‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٤‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ ú‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ( ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٣٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬‬
‫• ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٤‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:45‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 15‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ n‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪.ú‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻟﻮ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪n‬؟‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ Â‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ‪ ،Â‬ﺛﻢ ‪ .n‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:45‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 16‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺳﺒﻘﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﻭﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺴﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﱠ‬
‫ﻓﺘﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤُﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ ،Â‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:45‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻠﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﻄﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ )ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ( ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:45‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 18‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ؟‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ً‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﻮﺿﺎ ًء‬
‫ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:45‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 19‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) i‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) j‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪) .‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪AF‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‪...‬‬
‫• ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ؟‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺠﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪) G‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:45‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 20‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻭﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻫﺪﻑ؟‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ؟‬
‫ﻓﺠﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪G‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﱢ‬
‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ؟‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ؟‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ؟‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٫٠‬ﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ ،(j‬ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٫٠‬ﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‪.(i‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ؟‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪ ،(j‬ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٣‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‪.(i‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ؟‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ h‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ؟‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ؟‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؟‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ“ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:46‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 21‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ q‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ r‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻤﺴﺖ ‪ qr‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:46‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 22‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺸﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺸﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٢٢‬ﺳﺘﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.r‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻤﺴﺖ ‪ q‬ﺃﻭ ‪ r‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺤﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:46‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 23‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ ،Â‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،a‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺍﻣﺴﺢ؟[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]ﺍﻣﺴﺢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎء ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:46‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 24‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ i‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ j‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:46‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 25‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،A‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ”ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ“‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ((‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 4‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ١٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٣٤‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﻮ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD Speed Class 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:46‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 26‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ؟‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﻼﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﱠ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:46‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 27‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ﻣﻀﻤ ًﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫‪Windows 7‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ Windows Vista Service Pack 1‬ﻭ‪Service Pack 2‬‬
‫‪Windows XP Service Pack 3‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ًَ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﱠﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ )‪ (CPU‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ ١٫٣ Pentium‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻭ‪Core 2 Duo‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪ (RAM‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) Windows 7‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺖ(‪ ٢ :‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) Windows 7‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﺖ( ﻭ‪) Windows Vista‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﺖ(‪ ١ :‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ٥١٢ :Windows XP‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠ :ZoomBrowser EX‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٥٠ :CameraWindow‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ*‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫‪ ٣٠ :Movie Uploader for YouTube‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ٤٠ :PhotoStitch‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ٧٦٨ × ١,٠٢٤‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows XP‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Microsoft .NET Framework 3.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ )ﺑﺤﺪ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫)‪Mac OS X (v10.5 – v10.6‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ًَ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﱠﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ )‪ (CPU‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪) Intel‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٫٦ Core 2 Duo‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ )‪ ١ :Mac OS X v10.6 (RAM‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪ ٥١٢ :Mac OS X v10.5‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠ :ImageBrowser‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ١٥٠ :CameraWindow‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫‪ ٣٠ :Movie Uploader for YouTube‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ٥٠ :PhotoStitch‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ٧٦٨ × ١,٠٢٤‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:47‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 28‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ)‪ Mac OS X (v10.5‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩ )ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪) (CAMERA Solution Disk‬ﺹ ‪ (٢‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﻬﻞ[ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ]‪/User Account Control‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩ )ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪) (CAMERA Solution Disk‬ﺹ ‪ (٢‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Install‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ[ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:47‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 29‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (٢‬ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera using Canon CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪.[CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪/Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪/All Programs‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻴﻬﺎ ]‪ [Canon Utilities‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﺛﻢ ]‪.[CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Dock‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:47‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 30‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon Camera using Canon‬‬
‫‪/CameraWindow‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪ ،[CameraWindow‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:47‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 31‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ NB-6L‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﺔ*‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ ‪WS-DC10‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(AV‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ‪*AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪*IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫* ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪Windows/‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:47‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 32‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.NB-6L‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6L‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ACK-DC40 AC‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﻠﻤﺄﺧﺬ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ؛ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫‪This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard‬‬
‫‪and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding‬‬
‫‪MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and‬‬
‫‪non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T‬‬
‫‪patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.‬‬
‫‪No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:47‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 33‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ™‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫‪SELPHY series‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ‪...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﺤﻖ ﻟﻚ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ iFrame‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ‪ iFrame‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:47‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 34‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ‪ DIGITAL CAMERA Manuals Disk‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫”ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ“ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻣﻨﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻰ‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:47‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 1‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻴﺰی ﮐﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪NB-6L‬‬
‫)ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ(‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫)ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ(‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫‪CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﭽﯽ‬
‫‪WS-DC10‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ‪ DIGITAL CAMERA Manuals Disk‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺬﺍﺏ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ ،PDF‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Adobe Reader‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ ،Word‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ Microsoft Word/WordViewer‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﻭﺭﻣﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:47‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 2‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﯽ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺳﻠﺐ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﯽ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ‪ ،Canon Inc.‬ﻭ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﭘﯽ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻘﺾ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺾ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻳﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺨﻄﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ‪ Canon‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪) LCD‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ(‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﮑﻨﻴﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ ٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﮐﺶ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﮑﯽ ﻧﺎﺯک ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺍﺷﻴﺪﮔﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﮐﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺺ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪CANON INC.‬‬
‫‪30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan‬‬
‫‪CANON EUROPA N.V.‬‬
‫‪Bovenkerkerweg 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫• ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺟﺪی ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮگ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺯﺍﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﮐﻮﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺯﺍﺩﺍﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻮﺩک ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺍﻭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮑﺎﺭی ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮی ﻋﺠﻴﺒﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮی ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺣﻼﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻟﯽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﮑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻣﺜﻼ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ( ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺏ‬
‫• ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺧﻴﺲ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﮏ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻴﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺸﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻠﺰی )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻨﺠﺎﻕ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ( ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﺸﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﻫﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺏ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺸﻮﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 4‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﯽ ﺩی)ﻫﺎی( ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺳﯽ ﺩی )ﻫﺎ( ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ(‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻮﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬‫ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎً ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﺎﻑ( ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﺭی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻓﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎی ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺳﻮﺯﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 5‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻧﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻓﻠﺰی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﭼﻴﺰی‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﺸﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﻭﻣﻴﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻴﺒﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻨﺸﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻴﻒ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﯽء ﺳﺨﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 6‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ‪٢ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪٣ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ‪۴ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ‪٧ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻨﺪ‪/‬ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ‪٧ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪٨ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‪٩ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ )ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪١١ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪١١ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪١۴ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪١۶ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪١٧ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪١٨ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪١٩ ........................................................................ (Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪٢٢ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪٢٣ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪٢۴ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ‪٢۵ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪٢٧ ............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ‪٢٨ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ‪٣٢ ..............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪٣٣ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻨﺪ‪/‬ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫• ﺑﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﭻ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﭙﻴﭽﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺟﻠﻮی ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 7‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻧﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 8‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪CB-2LY‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎی ‪ o‬ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ) ‪( ١‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ) ‪ ،( ٢‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ :CB-2LY‬ﺩﻭ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ ) ‪( ١‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ) ‪.( ٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ :CB-2LYE‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ‪ ۵۵‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪CB-2LYE‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ) ‪ ( ١‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ) ‪ ،( ٢‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 9‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪١٨٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ‪Camera & Imaging Products‬‬
‫)‪” Association (CIPA‬ﺍﻧﺠﻤﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ“ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻤﯽ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫”ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪“.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪.o‬‬
‫• ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ )ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺎﻝ( ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢۴٠‬ﻭﻟﺖ )‪ ۵٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۶٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻔﺮﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺮﺁﻣﺪﮔﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺁﻣﺪﮔﯽ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺎی ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺣﺘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 10‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ )ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪*SD‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪*SDHC‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪SDXC‬‬
‫‪MultiMediaCards‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪MMCplus‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪HC MMCplus‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫* ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎی ‪ SD‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺭک ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SDXC‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SDXC‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪Eye-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪﻳﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻖ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ) ‪ ( ١‬ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ) ‪.( ٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 11‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﮔﺮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ) ‪ ،( ١‬ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ) ‪.( ٢‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ]ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ ،SDXC ،SDHC ،SD‬ﻭ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪] ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 12‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﻴﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻞ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻖ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪1231‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪5042‬‬
‫• ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.(١٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 13‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺨﺴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ op‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ op‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ú‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ،ON/OFF‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ٢‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻧﯽ )‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 14‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ n ،Â‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ 3‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ ‪ ٣‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١۴‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‪ ú ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ )ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ( ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪) AC‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (٣٣‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃﯽ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 15‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ 1‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ n‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ú‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ n‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﭼﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ Â ،n‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Â‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ،n‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ]ﺯﺑﺎﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:48‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 16‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ )ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی( ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﺎک ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺒﺬﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪) Eye-Fi‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Â‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ n‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻗﺎﻟﺐ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ 3‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ]ﻗﺎﻟﺐ[‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻗﺎﻟﺐ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:49‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 17‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪] ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ[‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺻﺮﻓﺎً ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﭘﺎک ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﮑﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻓﺸﺎی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ‪/‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﮐﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ( ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﯽ )ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﮐﻤﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻤﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﻕ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ‪ AF‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:49‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 18‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ؟‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﺪﺍی‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ A‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ‪ A‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻼﻳﻤﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:49‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 19‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺯﻭﻡ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ‪) i‬ﺗﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﺗﻮ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ‪) j‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭﺍﻳﺪ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪) .‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺯﻭﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺩﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺴﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭼﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ( ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ G‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:49‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 20‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﺭﻭی ﭼﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺩﺭی ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ G‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﺘﺤﺮک ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎً‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )‪.(Servo AF‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺯﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ۵٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭﺍﻳﺪ )‪ ،(j‬ﻭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ۵٠‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﺗﻮ )‪ (i‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﻕ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭﺍﻳﺪ )‪ (j‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﺗﻮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ۴٠ ،‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ )‪.(i‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰی ﭼﺸﻢ ﻭ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ‪ h‬ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺮﻧﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ”ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ“ )ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ( ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:49‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 21‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ )‪ AF‬ﻟﻤﺴﯽ(‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ )‪،(Servo AF‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ AF‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ 1‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼﭗ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ(‪ q ،‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻌﮑﻮﺳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ(‪ r ،‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ qr‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﺰ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:49‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 22‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪی‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﭻ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﮑﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﮐﺞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ q‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ،(٢٢‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ‪ ،r‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﮐﺞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ q‬ﻳﺎ ‪ r‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:49‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 23‬‬
‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﭘﺎک ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺒﺬﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ 1‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ،Â‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ ،a‬ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ؟[ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺎک ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪] ،‬ﻟﻐﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢۴‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:49‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 24‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ A‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ‪ A‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ‪ i‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ‪ ،j‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ]ﺿﺒﻂ [ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺮی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢۵‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:50‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 25‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻭی ‪ A‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ”ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ“ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩی ﮐﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻭی ‪) 4‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ١۶‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١۴‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ‪ ٣۴‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ۵٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ‪ ۴٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ‪ SD Speed Class 6‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢۶‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:50‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 26‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ 1‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻢ؟‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (٢٩‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﻭﺍﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:50‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 27‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺭک ‪ Canon‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ CD-ROM‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﻧﻮﻳﺴﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﭘﯽ ﻳﻮ )‪(CPU‬‬
‫ﺭﻡ )‪(RAM‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫‪Windows 7‬‬
‫‪ Windows Vista Service Pack 1‬ﻭ ‪Service Pack 2‬‬
‫‪Windows XP Service Pack 3‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﺘﻴﻮﻡ ‪ ١٫٣‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ )ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‪ ٢٫۶ Core 2 Duo ،‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫‪ ۶۴) Windows 7‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‪ ٢ :‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ ٣٢) Windows 7‬ﺑﻴﺖ( ﻭ ‪ ۶۴) Windows Vista‬ﺑﻴﺖ‪ ٣٢ ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‪ ١ :‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ)ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‪ ٢ ،‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫‪ ۵١٢ :Windows XP‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ )ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‪ ٢ ،‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠ :ZoomBrowser EX‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ ١۵٠ :CameraWindow‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ*‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ ٣٠ :YouTube‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ ۴٠ :PhotoStitch‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ ٧۶٨ × ١,٠٢۴‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫* ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ Microsoft .NET Framework 3.0 ،Windows XP‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ )ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ۵٠٠‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻤﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﭘﯽ ﻳﻮ )‪(CPU‬‬
‫ﺭﻡ )‪(RAM‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫)‪Mac OS X (v10.5 – v10.6‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻧﺪﻩ ‪) Intel‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‪ ٢٫۶ Core 2 Duo ،‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫‪ ١ :Mac OS X v10.6‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ )ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‪ ٢ ،‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫)ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫‪ ۵١٢ :Mac OS X v10.5‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ )ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ(‪ ٢ ،‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ )ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪ ٢۵٠ :ImageBrowser‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ ١۵٠ :CameraWindow‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ ٣٠ :YouTube‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ ۵٠ :PhotoStitch‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ ٧۶٨ × ١,٠٢۴‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:50‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 28‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭ )‪ Mac OS X (v10.5‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺳﯽ ﺩی ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫‪) (Solution Disk‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ[ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ]‪/User Account Control‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ[ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ]‪/Restart‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻣﺠﺪﺩ[‬
‫ﻳﺎ ]‪/Finish‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ[ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎپ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺳﯽ ﺩی ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫‪) (Solution Disk‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺳﯽ ﺩی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﯽ ﺩی ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﻭی ]‪/Install‬ﻧﺼﺐ[ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:50‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 29‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻴﺶ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ (٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ 1‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera using Canon CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ [Canon CameraWindow‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻣﻨﻮی‬
‫]‪/Start‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ[ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‪/All Programs‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ[‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪،[Canon Utilities‬‬
‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻭ ]‪[CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ‪) Dock‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎپ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:50‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 30‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫]‪/Downloads Images From Canon Camera using Canon CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ [Canon CameraWindow‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ]‪/OK‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ[‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ]‪Import Untransferred‬‬
‫‪/Images‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ[ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮی ﮐﻪ ً‬
‫ﻗﺒﻼ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﯽ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:50‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 31‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫‪*CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪NB-6L‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ*‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﭽﯽ ‪WS-DC10‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪*AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﺳﯽ ﺩی ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫‪*IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫* ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻥ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪Windows/‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺭک ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:51‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 32‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪.NB-6L‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ‪NB-6L‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻢ‪-‬ﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪AC ACK-DC40‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭ ﮐﻴﺖ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ‪ AC‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢۴٠‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫)‪ ۵٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۶٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻔﺮﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ‪MPEG-4‬‬
‫‪This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard‬‬
‫‪and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding‬‬
‫‪MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and‬‬
‫‪non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T‬‬
‫‪patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.‬‬
‫‪No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.‬‬
‫* ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:51‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 33‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ™‪ HDMI‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ )‪(high-definition‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺭک ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪SELPHY series‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺭک ‪ ،Canon‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮﻫﺎی ﺟﻮﻫﺮﺍﻓﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ Canon‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ ،Canon‬ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﻋﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﻧﺤﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ Canon‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی(‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ‪ SD-3C, LLC‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ‪ exFAT‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ‪ Microsoft‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،HDMI‬ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ HDMI Licensing LLC‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ iFrame‬ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ‪ iFrame‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣۴‬‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:38:51‬‬
‫‪EC300_GS_AR_FA.indb 34‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻊ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﻭﺭﺑﻰ ‪ /‬ﭼﺎپ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ‬
‫‪27/01/2011 08:20:43‬‬
‫‪© CANON INC. 2011‬‬
‫‪EC300_GSG-E-CTE_AR-FA_cover.indb 2‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising